Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-253 (10)
Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL 266100 - 25 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 be provided at all panel connections. -•m#, D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48 above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1 . Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own ELECTRICAL 266100 - 24 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using AOW insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall ELECTRICAL 266100 - 23 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off- Auto selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three- pole, three-phase hase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and in in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. -OWN 4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for the service. E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of ELECTRICAL 266100 - 22 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T8 lamps shall be 3500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect. 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications. 1 . All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 311 (rainproof) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC, as shown. 5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 311 enclosures, or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 21 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of colors will not be permitted. C. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as 'Fire Alarm System' with decal or approved markings d. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE ALARM'. 3. Final Tests / Warranty a. The system shall be fully tested by the contractor and NICET certified technicians in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested. b. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper functioning of the system and conformance to the specifications. The test shall be performed by factory- trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified. Final testing shall be performed by the same company that will hold and execute the Test and Inspection contract. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. d. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. 4. Training a. The contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the owner's designated personnel and fire department response teams on the operation of the system. 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets as shown on plans. Please reference fixture schedule for fixture types supplied by the owner. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state low harmonic electronic type, approvable for use on their system by Massachusetts Electric Co. Department. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are . ELECTRICAL 266100 - 20 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 supervisory devices. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. 3. Addressable Zone module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as required to accommodate existing zone wiring at fire alarm control panel locations. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. h. Carbon Monoxide Detection Provide carbon monoxide detector for use with alarm control panels. Detector shall be equipped with test switch, and single-pole double-throw relay for use with addressable interface module. Detector shall feature local 85 dBA buzzer (@ 10') and led visual display for occupant notification. Devices shall be listed to UL standard 2075 and tested to UL standard 2034. Install Carbon Monoxide Detector by Macurco model CM-15A or approved equal. F. Single and Multi Station Components 1 . Single and Multi station Smoke detection devices. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, provide single and multi station smoke detection in dormitory rooms as indicated on the plans. Smoke detectors shall feature local 85 dBA horn, test switch, and lighted power/alarm LED indicator. Unit shall be designed to mount to any single gang or 4" octagon box. Each smoke detector shall be powered from both Local AC source as well as internal 9 volt DC source. Install Single and multi station Photoelectric type Smoke Detection devices by Firex, model 4580 or approved equal. G. Installation 1 . Installation shall be performed b Licensed installers in a workmanlike manner. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained and qualified. 2. Wiring a. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local electrical codes. b. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. "^ All devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL ELECTRICAL 266100 - 19 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21 .3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. d. Detector Base - Standard Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1-gang, 3 %Z or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European BESA or 1- gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types. e. Manual Station - Double Action Single Stage Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 %Z (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 %Z (38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. Manual station shall be keyed alike with Control Panel. f. Notification Appliances Provide low profile wall mount horn/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile horn/strobe shall produce a high level db output an offer a full line of A.D.A. compliant strobes. The horn/strobe shall mount to a standard one-gang electrical box and with an optional trim plate accommodate two-gang, octagonal or four inch square electrical boxes. g. Initiation & Control Modules 1 . Relay Module Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps (pilot duty) to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. 2. Monitor Module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as shown on plans for monitoring of all waterflow, tamper, Carbon Monoxide detection and other -- ELECTRICAL 266100 - 18 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 analog devices shall provide dual LED indicators, a green LED shall flash to denote active communication, and a red LED shall flash to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which will provide a supervised remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, or an auxiliary relay contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure, devices shall remain capable of initiating an alarm sequence. a. Duct Detector Housing Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/ addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided. b. Smoke Detector - Photoelectric OW Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre- alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. C. Heat Detectors - Fixed Temperature - ROR Heat Detector Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of- rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate of ELECTRICAL 266100 - 17 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 control functions. , C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a minimum of 25% spare capacity and be wired in a Class B, Style 4 fashion. d. As a minimum, power supplies and notification appliance circuits shall operate all devices shown plus 25% spare capacity, and be wired in a Class B, Style Y fashion. e. Audible and visual signals shall be circuited separately to allow continued operation of the visual signal in the event of a silencing of the audible signal. E. Field Mounted System Components 1 . Power Supply System power supply(s) shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the effected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum. All AC power connections shall be to the buildings designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. 2. Fire Initiating Devices Intelligent System Devices: Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms. All ... ELECTRICAL 266100 - 16 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 that waterflow device is activated, the blue exterior weatherproof beacon shall also be activated. i. Activation of a Duct-smoke will shut-down the corresponding HVAC unit where applicable. j. Activation of a Tamper Switch will send a Supervisory Trouble to Public Safety. k. Activation of Carbon Monoxide detection shall ring locally, in addition, activation will send a Supervisory Trouble to Public Safety. D. General Requirements 1 . The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The system operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory involvement. 2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and microprocessor-based detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms. Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response characteristics, history logging, and support electronic addressing. A system-wide response (alarm sequence) to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds. 3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enable the user to set sensitivity parameters. All inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification. The system shall be capable of reporting the status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer. The system shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty (maintenance alert), prior to false alarming. 4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary power, batteries shall support 60 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. 5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs. 6. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. 7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable. All wiring shall be as follows: a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor waterflow, tamper, and status conditions from any related systems or conventional devices. b. Addressable control modules or relays shall provide auxiliary ELECTRICAL 266100 - 15 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 delivery to the installing contractor. - , 13. Provide copies of Operating & Maintenance manuals with the request for final inspection. O & M Manuals shall include the following: a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to the system, whether made as a field change or by a change order. C. Include a copy of the final test report, UL certificate and test contract. 14. Three 100% test are to preformed (Vendor, Vendor and Engineer, and Vendor/Engineer and Fire Department). Test areas will be coordinated with the Fire Department to determine initial layout will perform. 15. Signage and labels shall comply with MEC, NFPA 72, and the NFD checklist. 16. CO Detection shall be interlocked with the Fire Alarm Control panel and designed to activate in accordance with requirements set forth by authority having jurisdiction. Additional data line shall be provided by Smith College to accommodate signaling requirements of CO detection alarm. C. Sequence of Operation 1 . The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system smoke, heat, water flow, Duct Smoke) shall automatically: a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to Smith College Public Safety via data transmission to Campus monitoring system. b. Sound a voice evacuation signal over all audio circuits. C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a synchronized manner. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence. e. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD display located at the FACP and at all remote annunciators. f. Automatically shut down or control HVAC equipment to initiate smoke control functions as required. Manual override controls and programmable relays shall serve as an interface to the Building Automation System. g. Operate prioritized outputs to release all magnetically held smoke doors and magnetically locked doors throughout the building. h. Activate the red exterior weatherproof beacon. In the event ..., :TRICAL 266100 - 14 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on Simplex's systems for proper operation and interconnect to Campus monitoring system. 8. Provide equipment manufactured by Simplex. This constitutes the quality and performance of the equipment and matches existing system. 9. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101 . C. Current State Building Code. d. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. f. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 10. Submit 12 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare capacity allowances. C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of LCD message text assignments. d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification circuits and power supplies submitted. Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity allowances. f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier, Simplex, will provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction as well as interface to existing Campus system. g. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 11 . Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed installation. Provide the services of a factory trained technician for proper testing and operation of the inter-connect for Campus monitoring. 12. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to ELECTRICAL 266100 - 13 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage *+ drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity allowances. C. Confirmation that the equipment supplier, Simplex, will provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction as well as interface to existing Campus system. d. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 9. Three 100% test are to preformed (Vendor, Vendor and Engineer, and Vendor/Engineer and Fire Department). Test areas will be coordinated with the Fire Department to determine initial layout will perform. 10. Signage and labels shall comply with MEC, NFPA 72, and the NFD checklist. 11 . CO Detection shall be interlocked with the Fire Alarm Control panel and designed to activate in accordance with requirements set forth by authority having jurisdiction. Additional data line shall be provided by Smith College to accommodate signaling requirements of CO detection alarm. B. Scope (Park Annex and others by alternate bid) 1 . Install new analog/addressable fire detection, alarm and control system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The system shall interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein. 2. The fire alarm control panel is a microprocessor based fire alarm system. New peripheral devices shall be integrated onto the existing system digital data communications. Add addressable zone expansion cards as required to accommodate existing devices to remain. 3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; will maintain operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM memory, identify its' exact location, and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications. 4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. 5. All exceptions, variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer at the time of bid. 6. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm communications according to the contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. 7. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 12 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 12. Occupancy sensors to be Watt Stopper passive infrared/ultrasonic DT 200 or equal. 13. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws. 14. Timer switches shall be 120V 20A featuring 60 minute time cycle by Tork; Model C560M or approved equivalent. 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Scope (Albright and Lamont House; base bid) 1 . Install new zone type fire detection, alarm, and associated devices compatible and designed to operate with existing fire alarm control panel. 2. Extend existing fire alarm system loops using existing wiring methods to new devices locations where indicated on the plans. 3. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. 4. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on Simplex's systems for confirmation of operation and interconnection to Campus monitoring system. 5. Provide equipment manufactured by Simplex. This constitutes the quality and performance of the equipment and matches existing system. 6. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101 . C. Current State Building Code. d. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 8. Submit 12 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. b. Provide calculations to support the size of t ndby batteries notification circuits and power supplies ELECTRICAL 266100 - 11 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1 . Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 53521, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898HG1, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20350, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 53621G, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12212, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12232, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12242, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221 PLR, or equal. 9. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12222, or equal. 10. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle switches. 11 . Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "50" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "30" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections or noted below. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. H. Wire for Telephone & Data system wiring shall be Category 6 wire by Belkin or approved equal. Each cable drop shall feature two sets of conductors and shall be ran to tele/data head end equipment for termination by college. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1 . Structural conditions. 2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. Device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. C. Patching of all holes and trenches, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of steel construction, set screw type. C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3" and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. .0 , ELECTRICAL 266100 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings, holes and trenches greater than 4" and required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the General Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports O.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting kl and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not 266100 - 7 ELECTRICAL Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with ELECTRICAL 266100 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1 . 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to ELECTRICAL 266100 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open 266100 - 3 ELECTRICAL Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL �•. PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Upgrades to Fire Alarm system 2. New Fire Alarm Control panels and annunciator (Alternate Bid No. 1) 3. Interface with Campus fire alarm loop, provide code mandated exterior alarm and Knox Box. (Alternate Bid No.1) 4. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 5. Wiring devices and plates. 6. Lighting fixtures. 7. Removal of all wiremold and installation of replacement branch circuit conductors in wall and ceiling cavities/chases. 8. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. ELECTRICAL 266100 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 INDEX SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.6 TESTING 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 FIRE SAFING 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 .1 3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED 1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 .16 GUARANTEE 1 .17 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS 2.2 WIREWAYS 2.3 CONDUCTORS 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2.5 NAMEPLATES 2.6 WIRING DEVICES 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 266100 - 1 ELECTRICAL Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each fan installed. 3.12 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION HVAC 235500 - 40 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6 long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and, additionally, so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the 235500 - 39 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. 3.6 AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from cover- ing. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. HVAC 235500 - 38 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1 .5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1 .7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31 .9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. OOW 235500 - 37 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor. C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connec- tions where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. HVAC 235500 - 36 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 H. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be concentric lock type. I. Belts and Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM. All drives shall utilize a minimum of two belts. Provide each fan with a belt guard. Fabricate guard to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements. Secure to fan or fan supports without short-circuiting vibration isolators. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication and use of tachometer while guard is in place. J. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required by the drawings, schedules or application: 1 . Extended lube lines. 2. Scroll access doors, hinged. 3. Seismic restrained spring vibration isolators and mounting rails. K. Fan shall be Cook model CPV or equal by Greenheck or Twin City. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall e the units are cleaned turned ton,remove and clean construction dirt, dust, et befo filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 4" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co- ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. AW B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the 235500 - 35 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels shall be Karp Type DSC-214 M (12" x 12") or as noted. Access panels for this project shall be of aluminum construction. 2.19 UTILITY FANS A. Description: The fan shall be a single width, single inlet backward inclined flat blade, belt-driven centrifugal vent set. B. Certifications: Fan shall be manufacturer at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL/cUL 705) for U.S. and Canada. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The scroll wrapper and scroll side panels shall be a minimum of 14 gauge steel. The entire fan housing shall have continuously welded seams for leakproof operation and shall have a minimum of 1 %" outlet discharge flange. A performance cut-off shall be furnished to prevent recirculation of air in the fan housing. Bearing support shall be minimum 10 gauge welded steel. Lifting eyes shall be provided for ease of installation. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM, static pressure and maximum fan RPM. Unit shall be shipped in ISTA certified transit tested packaging. D. Coating: Steel fan components shall be Lorenized with an electrostatically applied, baked polyester powder coating. Each component shall be subject to a five stage environmentally friendly wash system, followed by a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder finish. Paint must exceed 1 ,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B1 17 test method E. Wheel: Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, 100% aluminum. All sizes shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. Wheel shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96, Balancing Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. F. Motor: Motor shall be heavy duty with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished for the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. G. Blower Shaft: Blower shaft shall be AISI C-1045 hot rolled and accurately turned, ground and polished. Shaft shall be sized for critical speed of at least 125% of maximum RPM. HVAC 235500 - 34 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or "Threadolets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close- nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard- drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11 . ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder;joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B1 6.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder)oint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 1316.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI BI 6.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with instal- lation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21 ; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21 . Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.17 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, Y pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.18 ACCESS PANELS HVAC 235500 - 33 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Run outs up to 2 in. : 1 % in. b. Mains 1 %" or less : 1 % in. C. Mains 2 in. to 6 in.: 3 in. C. Exhaust ductwork located in the Park Annex 3rd Floor eave space shall be insulated with 2" thick fiberglass board type insulation with vapor barrier jacket, thoroughly sealed throughout. 2.16 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1 . Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31 .1 , or ASME B31 .9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1 . Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot water. C. Materials 1 . Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1 .1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match , HVAC 235500 - 32 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.14 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within V of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.15 DUCT AND PIPE INSULATION A. New piping in all locations shall be insulated. 1 . All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA ac and/or hal UI o conform to oethese same and smoke jackets shall a ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of furnished the with jackets. Fittings, valve jacket materials bodies, fanges shall be ffurnurn used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied unroved byrthe Engineer.h rk have been tested by the Contractor and app 4. insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below. B. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: 1 . Steam and Condensate Return: 235500 - 31 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1 . Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.11 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.13 STEAM TRAPS A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. HVAC 235500 - 30 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-1 4T. 3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. C. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1 . Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931 . 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. D. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. E. Self-contained thermostatic control valves, manufactured by Macon, Model NT with ENT operator, shall be provided at each new piece of finned tube radiation and each new convector. Confirm sizing with Engineer. 2.9 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1 . Steam heating system: 25-300°F 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). A^ HVAC 235500 - 29 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: 1 . The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. 2.6 FINNED RADIATION AND CONVECTORS A. Furnish and install finned tube radiator enclosures and convectors as shown on Drawings. Enclosures shall be Ted Reed Thermal, Sterling, Vulcan, or equal. B. Enclosures shall be manufactured of 16-gauge cold rolled steel enamel finish with standard color selected by the Architect. 2.7 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1 . Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, %Z" aluminum mesh bird screen, and custom color Kynar 500 finish. 2.8 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, or Walworth based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts with stainless steel ball and stem—No Substitutions. B. Solder end valves are as follows: 1 . Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109. HVAC 235500 - 28 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 reached its minimum speed setting. 3. Minimum and maximum VFD speed settings for the exhaust fan shall be determined in the field by the BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor. e. Points List: 1 . Exhaust Fan S/S DO 2. Exhaust Fan Status DI 3. Exhaust Fan VFD Command AO 4. Exhaust Fan VFD Fault DI 5. Exhaust Air Damper Command DO 6. Exhaust Air Damper Position DI 7. Space Air Relative Humidity (3) AI (3) 8. Exhaust Suction Static Pressure Al I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1 . On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the HVAC 235500 - 27 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the fan is 100% initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until manually reset through the BAS. 4. Exhaust fan has an exhaust air damper interlocked with the exhaust fan. Before the exhaust fan is allowed to start the damper shall be fully open as proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close. C. Exhaust fan control: 1 . If the damper's open position switch has not been energized within 20 seconds (adjustable) of the fan start signal, the fan is stopped, exhaust damper is closed and an alarm is indicated at the BAS. 2. Whenever the exhaust fan is signaled to stop, on a failure of the fan speed control signal, on failure of the VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD's ramp down to the minimum pre-programmed speed at the programmed ramp rate and stops. 3. The VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps to the control point. The VFD is controlled off a single, common control point. Unless otherwise noted, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over 15 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 10 hz low. (adjustable) as set in configuration of the VFD itself. The VFD is not allowed to operate if the disconnect is open. On a failure of the VFD, as defined by an output from the VFD, an alarm is generated at the BAS, and the fan is disabled. d. System volume control: 1 . System volume control is accomplished by a VFD. Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the BAS. 2. Exhaust fan shall modulate between its minimum and maximum speed in response to the space humidistats, one per floor. At initial start-up the fan shall index to the 50% (operator adjustable) through the control system minimum speed position. If any of the space relative humidity sensors rises above 50% RH (adjustable) the exhaust fan speed shall be increased on a time proportioned basis until the respective space relative humidity falls below setpoint. Once all space relative humidity settings fall below setpoint the exhaust fan speed shall be decreased on a time proportioned basis until it HVAC 235500 - 26 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word process- ing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are listed at the end of each sequence. 1 . TOILET EXHAUST FAN CONTROL. (EF-1 A, EF-1 L, EF-1 PA) a. Toilet exhaust fan is a centrifugal exhaust fan controlled by a VFD and space humidistats. b. Unit operation: 1 . Exhaust fan shall be indexed on by a time schedule from the BAS. 2. Fan start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. 3. If a fan failure occurs at the exhaust fan, as detected by a current switch on the exhaust fan, the failed fan is stopped, exhaust air damper shall close, and as alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is 235500 - 25 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way , valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1 . The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated G. Systems Software 1 . The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. HVAC 235500 - 24 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be dia- phragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh trans- ducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the moni- tored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting to Fom C contacts rated for the application, Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of 20%to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have i The snap-acting tFom C contacts rated for the app contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts with be self-wiping, 150% of the loading application, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20 1F-140 1F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral aequat to Johnson Control, j. Freezestat shall be capillary type Model A70HA-1 C. 235500 - 23 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 IOWA 3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-1 OOK Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of +10F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+ 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA- 10K-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+ 0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272- 2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up HVAC 235500 - 22 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules - T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. Ow C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically Ow isolated. HVAC 235500 - 21 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1 . Global Network Controller - LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (Cmnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects , HVAC 235500 - 20 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be com- pleted per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure ANN 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1 . All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. HVAC 235500 - 19 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specifications shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. Base scope of work for each building shall include toilet exhaust fan control, including humidity sensors mounted as shown in bathrooms. ATC contractor shall provide variable speed VFD drives for exhaust fans. 9. Include the in Base Bid work two (2) Arcnet drops per building run to the main data closet, suitable for future connection to the campus wide control system communication network. Bid Alternate No. 2 shall consist of tying in the new controls to the campus network as part of the work of this project. 10. For Park Annex and Albright, the Base Bid includes self-contained control valves, Macon NT with ENT operators, for new steam radiators and convectors. Bid Alternate No. 3 shall consist of providing DDC steam radiation control valves and room temperature sensors for control at each new radiation and convector location in lieu of the self-contained thermostatic control valves. 11 . Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1 . Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical litera- ture, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function , HVAC 235500 - 18 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 - equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. S. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power using Belimo Controls for the control dampers and valves. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1 . All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature AM- Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. and prior to 5. The system, then o'ectt, sthall perform all oper t ng functions as acceptance p J detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing slist d in I/O Summary Tablesducers the functions to perform C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in I/O Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 235500 - 17 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 original condition. 8. HVAC coils are cleaned. The blower assembly is removed and also thoroughly cleaned. The drain pan is cleaned. 9. When all debris and particulates have been removed from the duct system, both the supply and return ducts are fogged with an EPA and FDA approved disinfectant and deodorizer. The germicide is drawn through the entire system with the blower in the HVAC unit. 10. Cleaned and painted grilles and diffusers are reinstalled and all pre-cut vacuum openings are silicone-plate sealed. 11 . The entire system is thoroughly inspected by a technician supervisor and witnessed by the Owner. 12. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and leave the work area clean and neat. 13. The inside of the ductwork shall be video taped prior to cleaning and video taped after cleaning. A copy of all tapes shall be given to the Owner at the completion of the project. 2.5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1 . All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Yankee technology, Inc. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All system points will be networked using Lan Gate Routers (LGR) tied into the Campus Ethernet, sharing all new and existing points in real time date. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, and thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by compe- tent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all HVAC 235500 - 16 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 and shall co-ordinate this work with the work of all trades. B. The source removal method of removing duct contaminants is required utilizing equipment designed specifically for air duct cleaning and disinfection by a qualified technician. Not Allowed: Shop vacuum systems, utilization of air handling system blower and/or remove truck vacuum units. C. Equipment: 1 . Portable self-contained vacuum with a minimum of 4,000 cfm negative air pressurization. 2. Portable unit must have four-stage filtration utilizing a gravity bin, electrostatic air filter, high efficiency pleated filter, and asbestos grade 99.98% efficient HEPA filters. 3. Amperage draw of unit must not exceed 30 amps. continuous. 4. Portable unit must have a safety circuit breaker and an audible warning alarm to indicate tripped circuit. 5. Air compressor must provide no less than 175 lbs. per square inch. D. Execution 1 . The power vacuum unit must be installed within 50 ft. of the duct to be cleaned. 2. The exhaust registers, grilles, and diffusers are removed. 3. All outlets are sealed closed. 4. Each section of the duct is isolated to limit the work area. 5. The vacuum machine is started to create a negative pressure within the duct system. 6. A high velocity air sweeper is then inserted into the branch ducts. (An air sweeper is a combination air compressor, air line, and air jet that assists in the removal of all particulate matter from the ductwork with a hose connected to the air compressor to supply up to 175 lbs. of air pressure.) 7. The registers, grilles, and diffusers are cleaned with a degreasing agent, dried, and painted (if necessary) to restore them to their HVAC 235500 - 1 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Q. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals used for ductwork with 12 oz. vinyl coated woven fiberglass duct connector fabric, such as Duro Dyne's Glasseal. No separation is required between screws or rivets and the materials in which they are inserted. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A. Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be sizes as shown on the drawings. Wall mounted registers shall have sponge rubber gaskets at perimeter of frame. Volume dampers shall be allen key operated. All units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. B. Colors and finishes of registers, grilles & and diffusers shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard finishes, unless otherwise indicated. C. Register models are based on Titus. Price or Tuttle & Bailey are approved equals. D. Schedule: 1. Exhaust Registers (TER & CER): Titus model 350FL, aluminum louver type exhaust/return register, 35 degree louvers, W blade spacing, border as required. Provide with aluminum opposed blade damper. TER (top exhaust register) shall be well mounted approximately 12" below ceiling. 2.4 DUCT CLEANING (Lamont House only) A. All existing ductwork toilet and shower exhaust at Lamont to be tied in to new EF-1 L shall be thoroughly cleaned by a professional duct cleaning service. This Contractor shall pay for all services connected to this work HVAC 235500 - 14 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with 1" x 1/16" strap bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, dynamic rated in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351 , 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wail opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. HVAC 235500 - 1 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to Al" clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections V-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged aluminum access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts HVAC 235500 - 12 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services. D. Fabrication shall not begin until the final mylar transparencies of all co- ordination drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Review of coordination Drawings shall not diminish the responsibility under this Contract for final co-ordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and other work. E. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and be resubmitted. F. The approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of Shop Drawing errors in details, sizes, quantities, wiring diagram, arrangement, and dimensions which deviate from the Specifications, Contract Drawings, and/or job conditions as they exist. Unless the Contractor specifically requests in writing, changes, substitutions, or deletions of specific Contract Document requirements with respect to any submissions, approval of the Shop Drawing by the Architect does not constitute acceptance. Approval of shop drawings containing errors does not relieve the Contractor from making corrections at his expense. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts for exhaust air on this project shall be constructed of sheet aluminum per SMACNA Standards. See paragraph Q. below for dielectric connection requirement where aluminum ductwork connects to existing copper ductwork in Lamont House. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining HVAC 235500 - 11 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. 1 .20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall prepare a complete set of mylar background Drawings at minimum 1/4 in. equals 1 ft. 0 in. showing architectural and structural features and other information as needed for coordination layout. Background Drawings shall be prepared under this Section. B. Circulate mylars among trades as necessary to show all information outlined below. Each trade shall sign and date each coordination Drawing. Co-ordinate all conflicts between trades prior to submitting drawing to the Architect. C. The information to be contained on the Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1 . Insert and sleeve locations if required by the Architect. 2. Structural, partition/room layout, ceiling grid, and other information needed for co-ordination including bottom of steel elevations. 3. All fire walls and smoke partitions. 4. Equipment layouts and egress routes for equipment removal. 5. Sheet metal work layout including bottom of duct elevations. 6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Fire Protection pipe routing including center line of pipe elevations. 7. Valves including valve tag numbers. 8. Access panels. 9. Electrical light fixtures, cable trays, panelboards, etc. Each trade shall show his work on the background Drawings with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Drawing shall indicate -01%, HVAC 235500 - 10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1 .17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4 in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. HVAC 235500 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11 . List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1 .16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure �•• HVAC 235500 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AW B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1 .13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1 .14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial co- mpletion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with HVAC 235500 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1 .11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co- ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for comple- tion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. HVAC 235500 - 6 "1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS (Submit separate submittal packages for each building) A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance AMW with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . HVAC 235500 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 ments of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measure- ments. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the '° work. J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane air handling unit and condensing unit, Trane or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Gould pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and HVAC 235500 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The nsertC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum require- 235500 - 3 HVAC Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 235500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1 . Fin tube radiation. 2. Exhaust fans. 3. Piping systems for duct cleaning, steam and steam condensate return systems, including valves and specialties. 4. Duct systems for exhaust air, including fire dampers, balancing dampers, registers and grilles. 5. Insulation for piping. 6. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. 7. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 8. Air balance, tests, start-up. All air testing and balancing shall be performed by Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College. 9. Guarantee. 10. Instructions. 11 . Record Drawings. 12. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS HVAC 235500 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 INDEX SECTION 235500 - HVAC PART ] - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.6 AIR FLOW BALANCE & TESTS 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 INSULATION 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 1 .11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING 1 .13 WORK CONCEALED 1 .14 GUARANTEE 1 .15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1 .16 PROTECTION 1 .17 CLEANING 1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING X1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS .20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS 2.4 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU) 2.5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 2.6 FINNED RADIATION AND CONVECTORS 2.7 LOUVERS 2.8 VALVES 2.9 THERMOMETERS 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.11 UNIONS 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES 2.13 STEAM TRAPS 2.14 HANGERS 2.15 DUCT AND PIPE INSULATION 2.16 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.17 STRAINERS 2.18 ACCESS PANELS 2.19 UTILITY FANS HVAC 235500 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Avw 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION 225400-39 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 oration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation PLUMBING 225400-38 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AW A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discol- PLUMBING 225400-37 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra- fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING PLUMBING 225400-36 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. P. Suspended Equipment: 1 . Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. Q. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and / or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Pumps - Base Mounted 1 , 4, 18, 23 Pumps - In-Line 23 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1 . Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 450 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. PLUMBING 225400-35 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1-1/4 in. I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1/2 in. diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20- ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1 . Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1/2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 in. I.D. PLUMBING 225400-34 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: 1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11 . Specification 1 1 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up Owl to and including 3 in., 1-112 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1/2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to 6 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. Amok PLUMBING 225400-33 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non- isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. Ao%,� PLUMBING 225400-32 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 APk 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of 6 1-5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner face tint grallpwi h the n enfloor wall or ceilinged if around the sea the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., hallbbe Type SWSras manufactureddby Mason the sponge. S eals Industries, Inc. traint shall consist of a spring element in 27. The horizontal thrust res series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either er sii e of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution - General: 1 . All vibration isolators coand dance 'w t' restraint installed in strict ac h the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections ebthat degrades no and the ise and building structure shall be made control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified "Bu lding" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the 225400-31 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1 . All joints must have '"" permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFQ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x 14 10x26 1/2x9 1-1/2x 13 4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 5x1914x30 1 x112-1/2x18 6x2016x32 1/4x12 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. PLUMBING 225400-30 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1-112 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 1908 F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 2508 F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 1908 F and 135 psi at 2508 F. Safety factors to burst and flange PLUMBING 225400-29 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel +, members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases PLUMBING 225400-28 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. PLUMBING 225400-27 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an A•• internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum of 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1- 1/4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting the rod 101"k PLUMBING 225400-26 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit OW stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since PLUMBING 225400-25 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 H. Seismic Force Levels 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Life Safety & Conduit Mounted Flexibility Equipment Equipment Mounted Either Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. e Vert. Vert. UBC * * * * BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.1 0.6 0.2 0.15 0.15 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. �• PLUMBING 225400-24 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 "`" code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. PLUMBING 225400-23 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. (2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 458 to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced PLUMBING 225400-22 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AOW C. All medical and life support systems d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill- in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of as follows:seismic restraints shall provide s ubmittals a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. support for (2) Provide all details of suspension and ceiling hung equipment. supplementary steel (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or 225400-21 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). • Air Separators • Battery Racks • Compressors • Comp. Room Units • Conduit • Electrical Panels • Piping • Pumps (All types) • Tanks (All types) C. Definitions: 1 . Life Safety Systems a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. -40% PLUMBING 225400-20 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. 2.16 WATERPROOFING (Lamont House showers) A. Waterproofing for shower bases shall be equal to Carlisle CCW serves liquid waterproof membrane. Each of the existing shower bases in the Lamont House shall be cleaned and resealed with liquid membrane as follows: 1 . Clean all existing bases with an acid base cleaner to remove all dirt and debris and scrape and remove all loose material. 2. Apply one coat of Carlisle Mod. CCW 554 interlaminar primer. 3. Apply one coat of Model CCW 502 waterproofing with a light silica sand aggregate. 4. Apply one coat of Model CCW 503 top coat waterproofing. 5. Replace existing shower and drying stall drain strainers. 2.17 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall *, apply. 225400-19 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 10 lb. pressure drop. C. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.12 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. 2.13 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard 1018. B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. B. Type "A" - pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves. C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant pressure. 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install the backflow preventers, as scheduled on the Drawings and as manufactured by Watts Regulator: B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or equal. low%* PLUMBING 225400-18 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 K. Mop Receptor (P-5) 1 . Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet - T & S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers, with vacuum breaker spout, pail hook, rough chrome plated, built-in stops, heavy duty assembly with bottom brace.hanger, No. 832AA 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop han 9 hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. L. Servicel Sink (P-6) 1 . Sink to be American Standard Model 7695.008 enameled cast iron. 2. Drain to be American Standard Mod. 7798.030 cast iron "p" trap with strainer. 3. Faucet to be American Standard Mod. 8340 with pail hook and vacuum breaker. M. Washing Machine Connection (P-7) l . Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with %" supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. N. Hose Bibb (P-8) 1 . Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. O. Laundry Tub (P-9) 1 . Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet- Chicago 27A89ra strainer and" center tail pieceh E-1 2 aerator. 3. Trim - Fiat Model P. Floor Drain (FD-1) I . Wade Model No. 1100 w/ FC9 Strainer. 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer. 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE (Park House only) without A. Furnish and install one (1) Powers Mod Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, vacuum breaker, single Thermostatic Water outlet volume/shut-off valve, dial thermometer (range: 0 to 140 0F), rough bronze finish, complete with unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion resistant thermostat element. B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall be sized for 45 gpm at a 225400-17 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath, white non-slip. 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Model C-96-2-X, pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, integral service stops, built-in choke and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Diverter tub spout cast brass adjustable spray shower head with arm and flange. 3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow. H. Bath Tub / Shower, Handicapped (P-3A) 1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath, white non-slip. 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S-96-600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of tub spout and Clear- Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. 3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow. I. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-4) 1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the owner with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains shall be Kohler Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve - Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. J. Shower Stall, Suites Bathrooms (P-4A) 1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the General Contractor with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains shall be Kohler Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Model C-96-1-X, pressure balancing mixing valve with lever handle, integral service stops, built-in choke and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Cast brass adjustable spray shower head with arm and flange. PLUMBING 225400-16 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Ook 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %" top spud and 1 .6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum breaker and angle stop. 3. Seat - Church Model295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. D. Water Closet (P-1 A) Handicapped 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %Z" top spud and 1 .6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1.6 gpf, with vacuum breaker and angle stop. 3. Seat - Church Model 295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. E. Lavatory (P-2) 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet - American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, Br assCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory (P-2A) Handicapped 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Supply Fitting - Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings - Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. 4. Mounting height shall be no higher than 34" from top of front rim to finished floor. G. Bath Tub / Shower (P-3) PLUMBING 225400-15 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.9 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. C. Access panels shall be furnished and installed at all valves, cleanouts, shock absorbers and unions. 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet (P-1) PLUMBING 225400-14 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN- 1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insula- tion with self-sealing lap, 1 thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2° F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1 . Hot water: 30°F - 180°F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES PLUMBING 225400-13 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson. F. Check Valves 1 . Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM Al 26, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931 . 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, .Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A - 3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440. I. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 Ibs. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot 0 2') intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot (8) intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1) of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they ,,,%� PLUMBING 225400-12 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Code and NFPA 54. All piping 2 and below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1/2" and above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure. 1 . All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet ends, with conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast ir assembly, Hammond Teflon packing, two-piece packin g g land Figure 1 R1 138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper malleable alloy stem, packing gland,gland, Teflon packing, and Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 225400-11 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract, Architectural, or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper. D. All hot, cold and re-circulating hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type I" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite- 100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. All below slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type "K" soft rolled with silver solder joints. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas PLUMBING 225400-10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. 1 .19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co-ordination drawings. All co-ordination drawings for the plumbing work shall be prepared by this Subcontractor on backgrounds prepared by the HVAC Contractor. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than %4"=1 ', clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes by the other trades. D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. PLUMBING 225400-9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. PLUMBING 225400-8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 1 .13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. PLUMBING 225400-7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. PLUMBING 225400-6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment s h a Underwriters abtrato standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform otheir requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in AW accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The respon- sibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the oh for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been app are not in accordance with the Specifications, and substitute u pplroved materials at be required to remove such materials his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees s require aldl for his work. He shall be required to secure other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for 225400-5 PLUMBING Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contrac- tor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS PLUMBING 225400-4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 renovated in their entirety. Lament House will be limited to re- sealing the existing shower bases. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, ROW and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The PLUMBING 225400-3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 lowk SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 2. Existing water heating system shall remain and shall be protected during construction. 3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 4. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 6. Gas piping system connecting to water heater gas fired and clothes dryers. 7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. 9. Albright House and Park Annex student bathrooms shall be PLUMBING 225400-2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Avw INDEX SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING PART ] - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CONNECTIONS 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.5 INSULATION 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.8 CLEANING UP 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3.10 DISINFECTION 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.11 FIRE SAFING 1 .13 PROTECTION 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 .17 GUARANTEE 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS 1 .19 COORDINATION OF TRADES PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 2.2 BALL VALVES 2.3 HANGERS 2.4 CLEANOUTS 2.5 INSULATION 2.6 THERMOMETERS 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 2.9 ACCESS PANELS 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE 2.12 DEMOLITION 2.13 TRAP PRIMER 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 2.16 WATERPROOFING 2.17 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL PLUMBING 225400-1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 I Threaded .Joints: Conform to ANSI 131 .20.1 , tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. K. Flanged joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. Mechanical Grooved joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. L. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification - . signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying their purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. C. Perform final test for Northampton Fire Department and assist in final test of fire alarm system. D. Submit all final documents to the insurance company as requested to obtain final approval. END OF SECTION - FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 22 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 A perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. 1. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 21 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of ,t00%. Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 20 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. M. Fire Protection Specialties 1 . Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as required by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with who g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1 , 1" NPT, 165°F. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165°F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 19 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 L. Valves 1 . Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U . , Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR1 154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT " FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 18 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install interme- diate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 17 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 close) fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of Y 9 p�p pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. K. Supports, Anchors, and Seals 1 . Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 , for piping larger than 4". b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attach- ments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 16 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1 . Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 15 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1 . Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. Ali concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-112" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalign- ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 82.1 ; cut threads full and clean using FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 14 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as speci- fied in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 1 10,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 13 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 . d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1 . Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI 1316.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1 . C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger) (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 12 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI Al 3.1 . a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve 215300 - 11 FIRE PROTECTION Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = V-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pi- lasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcon- tractors as well as the local representative for each item of equip- ment. 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 1 . The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Sub- contractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the co- ver: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 ate. work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Spec- ifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out ap- paratus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re- lationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1 . Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor- mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. in case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum require- ments of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 five (5) years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the require- ments of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 . Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub- contractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1 .3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configura- tion and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid inter- ference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 ANNk SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady prog- ress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Complete renovations to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all renovated spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system located in the bathrooms and adjacent spaces. (There is no Fire Protection work under this contract at Lamont House.) 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 3. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. 4. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome plated, quick responses heads in all spaces. 5. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford, CT. (Attn: Mr. David M. Gough) for review and approval. 6. Work in Albright and Park Annex House shall consist of complete replacement of all heads and piping in the bathroom and adjacent spaces. No sprinkler work is required in Lamont House. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Aok INDEX SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART ] - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 FIRE SAFINGS 1 .3 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 .7 PRODUCTS 1 .8 SUBMITTALS 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED 1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1 .16 GUARANTEE 1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS Ow PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 215300 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Mats, Inc. B. Carpet-Type Mats: Polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- (3- to 6- mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 11 mm) thick with nonraveling edges. 1 . Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Berber Vinylback a. Color: Charcoal 2. Mat Sizes: a. Lamont 1) Room l OOV: 60"x54" 2) Room 100P: 60" x 144" 3) Room 100ST3: 36"x100" 4) Room 100C1 : 36" x 156" 2.2 ENTRANCE TILES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1 . Blueridge, Inc. B. Carpet-Type Tiles: Polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- (3- to 6- mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 11 mm) thick with nonraveling edges. 1 . Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Modular Clean Step Texture (Class 1) C21 OT - Tiles a. Color: Charcoal. 2. Installation: Quarter-turn 3. Location: Albright and Park Annex PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Bound mats. 2. Direct-glue tiles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AM- a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1 .3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1 112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- (1 .3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 4. Finish: No. 4 (satin). F. Shower Curtain: 1 . Size: Minimum 12 inches (305 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mm) high. 2. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10-oz. (284-g) or 0.008-inch- (0.2-mm-) thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top hem. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. G. Soap Dish: 1 . Product: B-973 2. Description: washcloth bar. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). H. Robe Hooks: 1 . Product: Ives 583 2. Description: Stainless-steel, double pronged. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, M1326D. 2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 1 . Product: B-224 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rag hooks beneath shelf. 3. Length: 24 inches (610 mm). 4. Hooks: Three. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Rubbermaid, Inc. B. Grab Bars including towel bars and shaving bars: 1 . Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1 .3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. 3. Outside Diameter: a. Towel Bars and Shaving Bars: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) b. Grab Bars: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Configuration and Length: a. Towel Bars: Straight, 24 inches long. b. Shaving Bars: Straight, 12 inches long. C. Grab Bars: Straight, length as indicated. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: 1 . Product: Rubbermaid. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) ABS plastic, ivory. D. Mirror Unit: 1 . Frame: Stainless-steel channel. a. Corners: Mitered. 2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 3. Size: 18 inches wide by 36 inches high E. Shower Curtain Rod: 1 . Product: B-6047 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Materials: 1 . Soap Dispensers 2. Paper Towel Dispensers 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers 4. Shower Doors C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for accessories mounted on toilet compartment doors. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1 . Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1 . Identify locations using building and room designations indicated on Drawings. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 oil Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 112 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units (Albright and Park Annex): Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Replacement Shower Benches: (Lamont): Install panel to existing brackets with stainless steel carriage bolts. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Avok B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust- resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1 . Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out- swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and fabricating toilet compartments without field measurementsr Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Comtec Industries. 2. Santana Products, Inc. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1 . Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. D. Brackets (Fittings): 1 . Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum. a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster. E. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. F. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1 . Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear ""k anodized aluminum. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows: 1 . Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced. 2. Replacement Shower Benches: B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 10 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. , b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex. H. Existing Natural Finished Wood Substrates: 1 . Acrylic Varnish System: a. Topcoat: Interior acrylic varnish. I. New Plaster Substrates to receive wall covering: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. J. Plaster Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer (omit for previously painted surfaces. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex. K. Textured Ceiling Tile Substrates: 1 . Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1 A, spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). L. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including exposed pipe coverings. 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 10.1 A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). END OF SECTION 099123 .l*. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 *tWA*. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Interior latex. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1 . Latex Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 3.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). C. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). C. Existing sand-blasted brick: 1 . Clear Sealer System: a. Topcoat: Interior/exterior masonry sealer D. Painted Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Interior latex. E. Painted CMU Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Topcoat: Interior latex. F. Steel Substrates: 1 . Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1 Q. a. Prime Coat: D.T.M. metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex. G. Dressed Lumber Substrates: 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 63T. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. C. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. C. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and,restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 40W D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Wood Substrates: 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. J. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION February 5, 2008 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1 . Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in NPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Interior Latex (Satin): Mildew resistant finish. 1 . Location: Bathrooms 2. Products: a. Benjamin Moore: K&B 322 b. Zinsser: Perma-White 3. VOC Content: 150 grams/liter or less. D. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 1 . Location: Painted doors and trim: 2. VOC Content: 150 grams/liter or less. E. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 1 . Location: Metals 2. VOC Content: 200 grams/liter or less. F. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 1 . Location: painted vertical surfaces 2. VOC Content: 100 grams/liter or less. G. Interior Masonry Sealer: (Low sheen). 1 . Location: Exposed brick 2. Product: Trojan Masonry Sealer #60-66 3. VOC Content: None H. Acrylic Varnish: MPI #128 (Low Lustre). 1 . Location: Existing natural finish woodwork. 2. VOC Content: 300 grams/liter or less. 2.6 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). 1 . VOC Content: 200 grams/liter or less. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. S. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. U. Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methyl benzene). X. 1 ,1 ,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1 . VOC Content: 100 grams/liter or less. B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.4 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 1 . VOC Content: 100 grams/liter or less. 2.5 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). 1 . Location: Ceilings 2. VOC Content: 100 grams/liter or less. B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 1 . Location: painted vertical surfaces 2. VOC Content: 100 grams/liter or less. am*, INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 mok B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1 . Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1 . Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1 . Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1 . Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). AWK 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. 9. Plaster. 10. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 11 . Staining and Transparent Finishing. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1 . Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1 . Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut, scribe and fit PVC wall-covering sheets to heights indicated. Provide trim pieces at outside corners and wall caps. C. Where panels extend full height of partition between adjoining spaces, extend wall covering over top of wall and finish with trim piece. D. Lap adjacent panels a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm). Construct horizontal joints to shed water. E. Install accessories in locations indicated. F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other defects. Ask., G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. H. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams, joints, plumbing trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against substrates to receive paint finish, apply paintable sealant. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, fixture trims, and similar items. D. Remove all excess and waste materials. END OF SECTION 097500 PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA ,,,� PART 2 - PRODUCTS February 5, 2008 2.1 PVC WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS A. PVC Wall Covering: 1 . Manufacturer: Universal Bath Products. a. Product: High-molecular poly-vinyl chloride sheets 0.090 inches thick. b. Color: Bone C. Accessories: 1) Trim shapes: Standard trim for outside and inside corners. 2) Shampoo / Soap shelf. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer. B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant Silicone. 1 . Product: Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 097500 - PVC WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . PVC wall covering. 2. PVC Accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of PVC wall-covering. Indicate seams and termination points for each type of shower and bathtub surround. C. Samples for Coordination with other Finishes: 4 inch by 4 inch samples of sheet product. D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less Ow than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.2 PREPARATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install reversing every other strip. E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches (150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. Vinyl Wall Covering, VWC-L3: 1 . Location: Lamont 2. Product: Contractor supplied a. Wolf Gordon; G5757465 "Contour Slate"; 21 oz., Type II. 3. Repeat: Random. F. Vinyl Wall Covering, VWC-P: 1 . Location: Park Annex 2. Product: Contractor supplied a. Wolf Gordon; "Charlotte"; 21 oz., Type II. b. Colors: 1) Rear Stair: As selected by Architect 2) Main Entry: Torte 3. Repeat: Random. 4. Width: 52/54" OWN 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "InteriorPainting"and recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. AAW WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide the products listed in the schedule. 2.2 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. All products listed are 54" wide, except as noted. B. Vinyl Wall Covering, VWC-C: 1 . Location: Corridors 2. Product: Owner supplied a. Albright: Koroseal "Lawrence" Dover Cliffs reduced 50 percent; 21 oz., Type II b. Lamont: DL Couch Versa "Bellagio"; Shoji, 20oz., Type 11. C. Park Annex: Vicrtex "Triumph", White Sand, 20oz., Type II 3. Repeat: Random. C. Vinyl Wall Covering, VWC-SR: 1 . Location: Student Rooms (all locations) 2. Product: Owner supplied a. Wolf Gordon "Bliss" Custom Winter White; 21 oz., Type 1 3. Repeat: Random. D. Vinyl Wall Covering, VWC-L2: 1 . Location: Lamont 2. Product: Contractor supplied a. Wolf Gordon; G5757465 "Contour Dusk"; 21 oz., Type II. 3. Repeat: Random. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Vinyl wail covering. 2. Installation of Owner supplied wall coverings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for priming wall surfaces. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Verification Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1 . Wood-Veneer Wall Coverings: Condition spaces for not less than 48 hours before installation. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1 . Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096816 SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1 . Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 2. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11 , "Attached-Cushion Installations." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked ho* for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 D. Carpet CPT-P: 1 . Location: Park Annex 2. Product: Cambridge, Founder 3. Color: Skyscraper#35212 4. Construction: Textured patterned loop 5. Fiber: Diatron SD/BCF Nylon, Class I, Broadloom 6. Weight: 26 oz. with standard `Action Bac.' 7. Installation: Direct Glue. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1 . VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. C. 2-Ethyl-l-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h. C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Underlayment: Multiply underlayment as Specified in Division 6. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1 . Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 0W installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Carpet CPT-A] : 1 . Location: Albright 2. Product: Bentley, Urban Scene 3. Style No: 8US3406301 4. Color: Shelby Star 888863 5. Fiber: Antron Legacy Nylon, Class I, Broadloom 6. Weight: 34 oz. 7. Installation: Double stick using Dura "Protector" 54 oz. Class I cushion. B. Carpet CPT-A2: 1 . Location: Albright 2. Product: Cambridge, Inventor 3. Color: Contact Lenses 35110 4. Construction: Textured patterned loop 5. Fiber: Diatron SD/BCF, Class I, Broadloom 6. Weight: 28 oz. 7. Installation: Direct-Glue. C. Carpet CPT-L1 : 1 . Location: Lamont 2. Product: J &J 3. Style: Sneak Preview#2690 4. Color: Off-Broadway 2457 5. Construction: Dense patterned loop 6. Fiber: 100 percent solution dyed Nylon, Class I, Broadloom 7. Weight: 26 oz. with standard `Action Bac.' 8. Installation: Direct Glue. SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February S, 2008 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Carpet with integral cushion for direct-glue application. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1 . Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability. B. Samples for verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1 . Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1 . Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1 . Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet the manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet the surface. 3. Vacuum carpet the using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet the AIM% installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every the with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet the grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; Alm%, keep seams free of adhesive. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1 . VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. C. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h. PART 3 - EXECUTION Aok 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Existing Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1 . Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet the due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Carpet CPT-1-2: 1 . Location: Lamont 2. Product: Interface, Chenille warp 3. Style: 1462902500 4. Color: Hindsight #2687 5. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop 6. Fiber: Aquafil Struttura, 7. Backing: `Next Step.' 8. Installation: Quarter turn. B. Carpet CPT-1-3: 1 . Location: Lamont 2. Product: Interface, Cubic Colors 3. Style: 18Z*1 C 4. Color: Black #7269 5. Construction: Tufted Top Sheared 6. Fiber: Solution dyed Nylon 7. Backing: 'Next Step.' 8. Installation: Ashlar/brick with stripe parallel with long axis of room. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Sheet Carpeting." 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1 . Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300- mm-) long Samples. C. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1 . Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor the products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they look are to be installed. 1 . Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one- half tile at perimeter. 1 . Lay tiles in pattern indicated. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1 . Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA AMW February 5, 2008 G. Accessories: Provide standard transition strips at flooring material changes with resilient tile. 1 . Type: As selected by Architect. H. Seaming Method: Standard. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1 . 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. 'Oak" E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Endura Rubber Flooring, a division of Burke Industries Inc.;. 2. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.;. B. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness. C. Wearing Surface: Textured. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches. F. Stair Treads & Risers: Manufacturers matching integral tread and riser to flooring tile for waterfall stairs and treads only for existing stairs with nosing. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Rubber floor tile. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings. 2. Division 09 Section "Linoleum Flooring" for linoleum floor coverings. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor the installation indicated. 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. AOMl RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish. 1 . Apply two coat(s). E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. S. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks). C. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove linoleum floor covering 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 5 IN Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Location: Provide heat welded seams where in wet locations. 2. Match linoleum floor covering. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA APW February 5, 2008 E. Provide protective cover for floors subject to traffic until Substantial Completion F. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Dual or Real, as selected by Architect. 2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING A. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 1 . Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide. Apw B. Seaming Method: Heat welded. C. Thickness: 0.10 inch. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 1 . Provide reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of linoleum floor covering manufacturer. LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. G. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1 . Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1 . 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 24 hours after floor covering installation. - LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516.13 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096516.13 - LINOLEUM FLOORING PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Linoleum sheet flooring. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1 . Product Data for Credit MR 6.0: For linoleum flooring, including printed statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1 : For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1 . Show details of special patterns. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6- by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required. F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise an .13 LINOLEUM FLOORING 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Seamless Installation: 1 . Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying one coat liquid floor polish. E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.2 PREPARATION � A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Install underlayment with minimum number of joints. Avoid using sheets less than two feet wide. D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: I . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to lowvk substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, " RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Wood Underlayment: Multi-ply plywood underlayment 1 . Thickness: 1/4 inch. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. D. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering. E. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 1 . Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Retention strip: Metal clip designed to hold sheet in place at top of cove base F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1 . 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.: Smaragd. a. Provide colors, as selected by Architect. B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch thick. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. E. Seaming Method: Heat welded. F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Vinyl sheet floor covering, without backing. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS m*, A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, of each color. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 1/4 inch. C. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a layer of asphalt-saturated felt. D. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate. 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. 1 . Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. C. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats. 1 . Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. 2. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. D. Cover wood flooring before finishing. E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation. 1 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 096400 WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 4869, Type II. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." D. Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Saddles: 1/2" high, tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood flooring and adjacent material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. 1 . Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on substrates to produce a maximum 1/8- inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 1 . Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. B. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry. C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. 1 . Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed. B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING A. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove and end matched, and with backs channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. 1 . Species and Grade: MFMA-RL Second and Better Grade hard maple. 2. Cut: Plain sawn. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches. 5. Lengths: Random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. B. Finish System: Provide Owner's standard water-based Hillyard product. WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 096400 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1 . New wood flooring. 2. Field finishing new and existing wood floors 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and finish required, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For field-finished wood flooring, obtain each species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. C. Maple Flooring: Comply with applicable MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece. WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AW 1 . Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.3 INSTALLATION IOW A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 6. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1 . Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1 . Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed.points: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half- width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Provide samples for on site verification and selection. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct- hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1 . High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high- humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1 . Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-co UNS No. N04400. peer-alloy 3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1 . Structural Classification: -duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel Aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram- negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 . 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR BATHROOMS - ACP A A. Products: Provide the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ceramaguard. B. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. C. Thickness: 5/8 inch (1 5 mm) Insert thickness. D. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm), except 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm) where indicated. E. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR NON-BATHROOM AREAS - ACP B A. Products: Provide the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cirrus. B. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular. C. Thickness: 7/8 inch (21 mm) Insert thickness. D. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 2.4 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR REPLACEMENT IN LAMONT AVW A. Products: Provide any 12 inch by 12 inch tile of similar texture and pattern. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1 . Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. •0 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1 . Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 2. Acoustical ceiling tiles for replacement of missing tiles in existing ceilings scheduled to be painted. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1 . Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12- inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.6 to 2.4 mm). Fill all voids and imperfections. Allow plaster to set, then scratch and immediately double back with gypsum veneer plaster to uniform total thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 2. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. B. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: As indicated on Drawings. , B. Single-Layer Application: 1 . On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall panels, to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically and parallel horizontally and perpendicular to framing, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Curved Partitions: Comply with gypsum base manufacturer's written installation recommendations. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Trim: Install in the following locations: 1 . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges Insert requirements. 3. L-Bead: Use at dissimilar materials. 4. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved soffits. 3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between moisture- and mold-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AW 2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16-inch (1 .6-mm) offsets between planes of gypsum base panels, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m) noncumulative, for level, plumb, warp, and bow. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch 0 .6 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints, other than control joints, at corners of framed openings. F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Cover both sides of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed spaces, including above ceilings, except in internally braced chases. 1 . Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. I. Wood Framing: Install panels over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. "Float" panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. Fastener Spacing: Comply with ASTM C 844, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements. 1 . Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. along framing members for wall or ceiling application. 3.3 INSTALLING PANELS A. Install gypsum base panels for veneer plaster in the following locations: 1 . Regular Type: Unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Embedding Material for joint Tape: 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844 unless manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent. 1 . Do not allow gypsum base to degrade from exposure to sunlight as evidenced by fading of paper facing. , GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; DensArmor Cote Interior Veneer Plaster. b. National Gypsum Company; X-KALibur Plaster. C. USG Corporation; Diamond Interior Finish Plaster. 2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588/C 588M. 1 . Regular Type: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: With moisture- and mold-resistant core, paper facing on both sides of panel, and 1/2-inch (13-mm) thick, regular-type core. a. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273; no mold growth after four weeks' exposure. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1 . Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, except Plastic in bathrooms containing showers. Provide trim with tear away strips where veneer plaster meets dissimilar materials 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. "* B. Joint Tape: GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING , A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) for 7 days before application of gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is d ry. C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly. 1 . Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels, for prevailing ambient temperature, that produce normal drying conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application until it is dry. D. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material. 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 092613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 3. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing steel framing and other components of gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1 . Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each trim accessory. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1 . Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Curved Partitions: a. Install flex-track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (1 50 mm) o.c. D. Direct Furring: 1 . Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1 . Space studs as follows: a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1 . Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1 . Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1 . Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of-type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1 190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162- inch (4.12-mm) diameter. D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1 . Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). b. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm). E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. C. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm). B. Flex-Track: Provide flexible runner for forming curved soffits. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. -low NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 "* SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1 . Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls in Lamont, framed soffits, furring, etc. in Lamont and Albright). B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed with Z- shaped furring members. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1 . Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Zi 20), hot-dip . galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1 .59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1 .21-mm-) diameter wire. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 Y2 pr FBB 223 Butts 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP 1 Sweep 18100 1 Threshold 271 AK 1 10" kickplate 1 Ives 447/448 Stop Heading 2 (Student Rooms) 1 MR/ML2065 Lockset 1 Yz pr FBB 179 Butts 1 Ives 447/448 Stop Heading 3 (Stair Doors) 1 ML2010 Passage Set 1 Closer 1 Magnetic Hold-Open Device 2898 1 YZ pr FBB 199 Butts Heading 4 (Single User Bathrooms) 1 MR/ML2230 Lockset 1 Y2 pr FBB 179 Butts 1 Ives 447/448 Stop Heading 5 (Public Bathrooms) 1 ML2010 Passage Set 1 Closer 1 Yz pr FBB 199 Butts 1 Ives 449 stop w/holder Heading 6 (Cage Enclosures) 1 DL 4011 Deadlock 1 YZ pr 8" strap hinges 1 Ives 410 pull END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 14 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA AOW February 5, 2008 C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1 . Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS Note: Provide kickplates at all first floor doors. Heading 1 (Main Entry) 1 Exit Device CD99NL with Electric Strike 1 Cylinder 3080 1 Cylinder 100-118-A02 1 Closer 4111-696 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 13 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI Al 15 Series. 1 . Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1 . Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1 . Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. DOOR HARDWARE 12 087100 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al 56.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A] 56.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 11 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing OWN other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 7011702. F. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). 5. Zero International (ZRO). 2.14 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMA A156.21 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation '° Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1 :2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Maximum 1/2 inch high. D. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). 5. Zero International (ZRO). 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1 . Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. DOOR HARDWARE 10 087100 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA Al 56.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material: i . Material: 0.050-inch- thick bronze. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Al 56.16. 1 . Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede AWK traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 2.13 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A] 56.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1 . Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Five. b. Master Keys: Six. C. Grand Master Keys: Six. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Six. 2.9 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.3 1 , Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1 . HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 2.10 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width. C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. D. Surface Closers: BHMA Al 56.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 1) General Use: 4010 2) Barrier-free: 4030 3) Exterior Doors: 4020 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. F. Manufacturers: 1 . Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 2. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 1 A is indicated. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1 . Number of Pins: Seven. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1 . Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1 . Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 2.8 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA Al 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1 . Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's master ring existing system. 2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number that matches the Owner's registration number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Do Not Duplicate. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1 . Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: 1 . Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al 56.13. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al 56.5. 3. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Al 56.13. 1 . Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Exit devices shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1 . Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square. E. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1 . Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA Al 56.1 . B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA Al 56.7. C. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Latches shall not require more than 15 IV to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA Al 56.25. D. Lock Trim: 1 . Levers: a. Newport NSA, except NSM where indicated 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February S, 2008 lak PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1 . Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1 . Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. '"k, DOOR HARDWARE 087100 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1 . Owner's Representative: Don Saltmarsh. 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies access control system. C. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. C. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1 . Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a ", single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1 . Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access control system. C. Other Action Submittals: 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final DOOR HARDWARE 087100 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 085200 AOW WOOD WINDOWS 08S200 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1 . Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1 .1-by-1 .4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1 .0-by-1 .1- mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1 . Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. D. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500 mm width plus length), glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.8 WOOD FINISHES A. Factory-Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat complying with WDMA T.M. 1 1 on exposed interior wood surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 00*111 tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 F. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 1 . Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. (140 Pa) or more than 15 Ibf/sq. ft. (720 Pa). 2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. B. Patterned Glass: Provide obsure patterned glass for all replacement units. C. Muntin Patterns: Match existing muntin patterns with simulated divided lites. 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion- resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight- fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1 . Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in manufacturer's standard color. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 * F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed. I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 7011702. 1 . Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702. J. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 7011702. 2.3 WINDOWS: A. Window Type: Double hung or Fixed as indicated. B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1 . Performance Class and Grade: LC 35. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 52. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100. 1 . U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.0 W/sq. m x K) or less. E. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1 . Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (5 cu. m/h x sq. m) of area at an inward test pressure of 1 .57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. b. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc. C. Loewen, Inc. d. Marvin Windows and Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water-repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard extruded- aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (150-MPa) ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi (1 10-MPa) minimum yield strength. 1 . General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's written specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match existing window color. C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Hollow extrusions and finish to match clad frame members. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1 . Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 type, class, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Metal Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Eagle Windows or a comparable product by one of the following: WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load • Structural Test: 1 . Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet 0 0 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2- Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s). b. Importance Factor: I. C. Exposure Category: A. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1 . Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Thermal-break details. 7. Glazing details. 8. Window cleaning provisions. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1 . Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and operable wood-framed windows of the following type: 1 . Aluminum clad. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1 . LC: Light Commercial. B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1 . Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: 1 . Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both gateway performance and optional performance grade. B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors will be installed. 1 . Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1 . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Interior Doors: 1 . Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select. 2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Douglas fir or western hemlock, vertical sawed/sliced. 3. Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that required by WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated As indicated. 4. Interior Door Types: 1 3/4 inch thick of size and style as indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W Series standards, and hardware templates. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. Finish faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. B. Finish wood doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. 1 . Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Interior Doors: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for how finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Low-Emitting Materials: 1 . ' Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. C. Panel Products: Any of the following: 1 . Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Veneer core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 2. International Door and Latch. 3. JELD-WEN, inc. 4. McPhillips Manufacturing. ►, 5. Simpson Door Company. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable. C. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Provide WIC-Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors meet requirements of grades specified. 3. Provide WIC-Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. . C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134- mm) section. 1 . Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: 110W*,, STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Factory finishing stile and rail wood doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction. 1 . Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data. 1 . Indicate dimensions. 2. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 APW 2.6 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1 . Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.7 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1 . Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1 . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 2.8 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 7. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 8. Core: Particleboard. 9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 1 5-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1 . Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1 . Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: 1 . Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Awk 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 4. Ipik Door Company. 5. Lambton Doors. 6. Marlite. 7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 8. Vancouver Door Company. 9. VT Industries Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1 . Heavy Duty. C. Particleboard-Core Doors- 1 . Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 1 . Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1 . Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Select white maple. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AW A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according to NFPA 252. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42- by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 06 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1 . Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Awk. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 3.6 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. Base flashing and repair to roof is under existing warranty. Comply with Manufacturer's requirements for work under existing warranty. END OF SECTION 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. C. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Apply cold fluid-applied adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer and install fleece-backed roofing membrane. D. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1 . Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. G. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. 3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. D. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing membrane. F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1 . Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 2. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof- drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installroofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 6. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. ,.,, 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1 .5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1 . Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Thickness: 60 mils (1 .5 mm), nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1 . Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1 .5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Repairs to Adhered membrane roofing system. B. This Section includes the installation of acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips furnished under Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers and blocking. 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review base flashings, special roofing details and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 5. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 F. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF RADIANT BARRIERS A. Install radiant sheets behind existing steam radiators. Cut panels one inch smaller than the height and width of the radiator. 1 . Install self adhering trim strip after wall covering has been completed. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor- retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved, into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1 . Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle- type insulation anchors as follows: 1 . After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation- retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. E. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, by machine blowing, to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1 . For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. Alwk THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Apt* 2.3 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber. B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 2.5 RADIANT BARRIERS A. Sheet Radiant Barriers: ASTM C 1313 and as follows: 1 . Products: AOW a. FBF Insulation: 2. Sheet Construction: Foil on both sides of 3/16" polypropylene bubble substrate. 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 5 and 10, respectively. 4. Sheet Width: 48 inches 5. Edge Strips: Outwater Plastics; #2001-POL/C a. Size: 5/16" by 1" L-mould with adhesive strip. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 1 . Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyan u rate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 , with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm). 1 . Available Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Rmax, Inc. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Loose-fill building insulation. 2. Radiant barriers. 3. Vapor retarders. 4. Sound attenuation insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. A THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Aft 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with construction adhesive. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim. 1 . Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1 .5 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400- mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. H. Cabinets: Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 1 . Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 stainless steel wafer-head screws and finish washers sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through supports into underside of countertop. 1 . Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400- mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant. J. Tack Surfaces: Adhere directly to substrate with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 1 . Install tight to trim edges. 2. Seams: Install one continuous piece without seams. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 OPW INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.11 TACK SURFACES Awk A. Product: Forbo Industries; Linoleum tack surface B. Color: As selected by Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches (1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1 . Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1 . Match Architect's sample. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.9 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid- surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1 . Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes. D. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. 2.10 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Grade: Custom. B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch (19-mm) solid lumber. C. Cleats: 3/4-inch (19-mm) solid lumber. D. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1 . Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.6 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. ^** . B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1 . Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. D. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High- pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1 . Match Architect's sample. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1 . Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1 . Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1 . Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1 .5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch 0 .5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 3. Integral Bowls: 830 F. Solid-Surfacing Material (Shower Base - Park Annex 300T2): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Swan Corporation (The). 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Product: R-3260, handing as shown. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095- inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: C. Catches: Sugatsune draw latches, stainless steel. D. Towel Hooks: Sugatsune HT50, stainless steel finish. E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1 . Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. F. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 401W 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1 . Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2, except for density. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high- pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. C. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. E. Solid-Surfacing Material (Countertops, sinks and matching stools): Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in Category B & C. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1 . Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Solid-surfacing materials. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 tow SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Wainscot panels. 4. Plastic-laminate countertops. 5. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 6. Closet and utility shelving. 7. Tack Surfaces B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1 . Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.5 FLOOR JOIST REPAIR/ INSTALLATION A. General: Where existing joists are rotted or notched sister engineered LVL to existing joist. Attach to floor joists as follows: 1 . Where sistered to wood members use staggered tek-screws 16"o.c. 2. Where existing joist is replaced, use metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm) and do not embed more than 4 inches 0 02 mm). C. Frame openings for ductwork with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm). D. Add new joists or solid blocking @ 16"o.c. between existing joists where new partitions run parallel with proposed wall framing. 3.6 EXISTING JOISTS A. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom. B. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between joists. 1 . Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19- by-64-mm actual-) size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 3.7 POLYCARBONATE SHEET (AREAWAY COVERS) A. Cut sheets to proper length according to manufacturer's recommendations. Pre-drill oversize holes for fasteners to provide compression fit between fastener and substrate. Install sheet over continuous blocking and ledger. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89- mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38- mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1 . For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. D. Mesh Partitions: Install mesh to framing with staples. Lap fabric at splices. Cut wire flush with horizontal or vertical wires in panels that are not full sheets. Open ended wires that are exposed at ends of panels or sheets are not acceptable. 1 . For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AVW. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1 . Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1 . Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness. H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 . NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code. I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. J. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1 . Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key- beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 3. Haden Metal Products, Inc. 4. KC Metals Products, Inc. 5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. USP Structural Connectors. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1- 1/4-inch- (32-mm-) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1 . Thickness: 0.050 inch (1 .3 mm). 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Woven Wire Cloth: 2"x4" x 0.120" diameter, galvanized steel fabric, 48 inches wide. B. Multi-wall Polycarbonate Sheet: 1Omm thick, 48 inch wide sheets of clear polycarbonate plastic faces and webs. 1 . Source: Ecologic Technologies, Inc. Pasadena, MD 21123-1038; (410) 431-7106. 2. Fasteners for Polycarbonate Sheet: Hex Head self-tapping screws with neoprene washer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 AW 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA. E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1 , Exposure 1 , C- D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 5/8-inch (16-mm) nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1 . Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1 . E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME BI 8.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type ..k adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Finnforest USA. C. Georgia-Pacific. d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. e. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. f. Roseburg Forest Products Co. g. Weldwood of Canada Limited; Subsidiary of International Paper Corporation. h. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12- inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1 ,800,000 psi (12 400 MPa). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1 . Blocking. `° 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1 . Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1 . Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Standard or 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Ank 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1 . Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1 . Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species. C. Ceiling .Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1 . Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and AOW ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .4 SUBMITTALS Aoft A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1 . Engineered wood products. 2. Metal framing anchors. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1 . Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Wood furring. 5. Utility shelving. 6. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (1 14 mm actual) in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal 0 14 mm actual) or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A. Anchor railing ends with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1 . Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1 . For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field 01W connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in- place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1 . As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to ' PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Apk B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1 . Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1 .7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1 . Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. .,", PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Steel pipe railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1 . Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1 . Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 . For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 11 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 . Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and through inner wythe to a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) of the exposed face of masonry. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. B. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1 . Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. C. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: -40%k UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 10 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1 . Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches (610 mm) 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. horizontally. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. 1 . Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. B. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1 . Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and to match width. 3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: ovftl UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 9 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces ,..s, and, where possible, cut edges concealed. D. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. E. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1 . For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1 .5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement- type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100- mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1 . For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1 . For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor- driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2) Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard. , 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: 1 . Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long. 2. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3- 1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm) long. 3. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV- resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint ,. and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent. B. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1 . Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. 2. Available Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. C. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-WaI Division; Polytite MortarStop. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or HO1 , cold-rolled copper sheet, 10- oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections as long as practical. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Copper Fabric. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. Aw 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing. 2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Cop-R-Cote. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Cop-A-Cote. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Coat Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Coated Copper Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Coated Copper Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Copperseal. 3. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene- diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1 .0 mm) thick. a. Available Products: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 ,. mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Re-use salvaged brick: 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 . E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1 . For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. H. Water: Potable. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1 .5 to 2.5 mm) made from steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication not less than 0.053 inch (1 .3 mm) thick. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: 5. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. B. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55. 1 . Weight Classification: Lightweight. Awk UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. F. Do not store materials in such a manner that would impose loads greater than 40 lbs. per square foot on existing roof structure. Only place materials on the roof that can be used that day. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, protect open walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1 . Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1 . Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Concrete brick. 3. Face brick. 4. Mortar and grout. 5. Reinforcing steel. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Work Procedures: Submit sequencing methods for reconstruction including protection measures for existing roof and adjacent surfaces. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1 . Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 4"'k authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1 . Format: DWG, Version of AutoCad compatible with Owner's system, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2004 or later. C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1 . Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. AOW PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,,Wk 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1 . Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. I. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When ,. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1 . Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Submittals B. Related Sections include the following: 40AII 1 . Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1 . Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1 . Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. D. Record Submittals: Submit one copy of each approved submittal in a binder organized by Specification Section. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Aaft� Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 00K F. Warranties: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties. 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1 . Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1 . Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1 . Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1 . Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1 . Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1 . Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 00ft. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number.of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Material and chemical composition. 4. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to -aw enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1 . System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1 . Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1 . Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1 . If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1 . Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1 f- inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 . Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. ,. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1 . List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1 . Title page. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1 . Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS , A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at within 15 days of Substantial Completion. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably ., dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection ''" k for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt- free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1 .5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1 . Organize list of spaces in sequential order and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1 .6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1 . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location , designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 6. Complete startup testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1 .4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1 . Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1 . Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1 . Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1 . Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1 . Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1 . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in AWk increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1 . Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1 .5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1 . Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-suppression systems. 3. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces odW cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 40%, I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.5 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1 . Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. EXECUTION 017300 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1 . Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1 . Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION 017300 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1 . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7 feet in spaces were pipes, ducts and wiring is exposed to view. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. AOW E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 . Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. ,Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of ... mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1 . Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1 . Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before EXECUTION 017300 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 004 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 . Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with Aaw those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 45 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 . Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1 . Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1 . Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1 . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under• cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1 .7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1 . Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1 . Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 . Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1 . Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1 .6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1 . Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 . Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. g. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. h. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. i. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1 . Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1 . Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Aoft" 1 . Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1 . Extent of Fence: As required to enclose portion of Site determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. F. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration during selective demolition operations. 1 . Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07- mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire- retardant plywood. 2. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. G. Fire Protection: Maintain existing fire-protection facilities during construction. 1 . Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 3.4 BUILDING COMPONENT PROTECTION A. Existing Conditions: Survey existing conditions and document conditions that represent physical damage to building components schedule to remain in service prior to commencing with the Work. Review with Architect and Owner for acceptance of existing conditions. Provide protection measures necessary to prevent damage from construction operations. B. Existing Roof (Lamont): Provide temporary plywood walkways on pads over all roof areas subject to foot traffic and required for staging the work. Provide temporary barricades to prevent foot traffic in non-protected areas. C. Interior Finishes: Where interior finishes are scheduled to remain provide protection measures as follows: 1 . Floors: Cover entire floor area with protective pads and plywood walkways. 2. Wall and ceiling finishes: Provide measures to restrict dust migration from construction activities that will soil or ruin existing finishes scheduled to remain. 3. Stair rails, balusters, wood wainscot and other finishes subject to damage: Provide protective covers to prevent damage to horizontal and vertical surfaces in traffic areas. 4. Rooms listed as N.I.C: Restrict access to portions of the building that are not part of the contract with temporary barricades and enclosures. 5. Furniture Pads: Provide furniture pads and dust protection for student . room furniture relocated for finish work in traffic areas or place in secure rooms and provide dust protection. D. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are protected, cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1 . Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. E. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Alak TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 001, e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1 . Provide incombustible construction for sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 . 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Do not block driveways, roads or walks unless within designated work areas. C. Parking: Use on street parking or (if available) designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. On site parking will be very limited. D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Unauthorized signs are not permitted. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1 . Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will not be permitted. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 . Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1 . Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be not be permitted. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1 . Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as approved by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1 . Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Owner will provide temporary telephone service field office location for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone. 1 . Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Common-Use Field Office: Designate space in the building for use as a field office of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1 . Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables and plan rack. 2. Drinking water. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1 . Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1 . Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 connections and extensions of services as required for construction ... operations. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. look, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1 .8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1 .4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's representatives, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. , Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S / ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1 . Approved 2. Approved as Noted 3. Not Approved 4. Revise and Resubmit C. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents or submittals greater than the required number of copies requested may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 40W E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 . Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1 . Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm). 3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. look I. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1 . Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1 . Maintain record copy of submittal for incorporation into Project Manual. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" taken by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1 . Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1 . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01 .A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations A,*. from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1 . Submit one copy of submittal to Architect in addition to specified number of copies to Architect's consultant. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1 . Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 10"O A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be not provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1 . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized ,,w*, because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1 . Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents require consultants review, submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow days 14 for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1 . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Architect's consultants. ° SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 5. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 6. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 7. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1 . Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1 . Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Fabrication. d. Deliveries. e. Installation. f. Tests and inspections. g. Adjusting. h. Curing. i. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 5. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Finishes completion. b. Completion of mechanical installation. C. Completion of electrical installation. d. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 2.4 REPORTS A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1 . Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1 . Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 14 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Inspection and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for sub-trade final inspections and fire alarm testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1 . Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. . d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: look CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1 . Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1 . Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1 . Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1 . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's and Construction Manager's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 1 . Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 w`+ SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1 . Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Field condition reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1 . Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change 1,, Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 A 10. Contractor's signature. 11 . Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1 :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1 . The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. D. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Review and update log at each meeting. Include the following: 1 . Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 1 1) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Send copy to Building Commissioner. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1 .8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1 . RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1 . Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the 10% RFI PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 q. Installation procedures. r. Coordination with other work. S. Required performance results. t. Protection of adjacent work. U. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. I. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. S. Security. t. Progress cleaning. U. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Related Change Orders. C. Purchases. d. Deliveries. e. Submittals. f. Possible conflicts. g. Compatibility problems. h. Time schedules. i. Weather limitations. j. Manufacturer's written recommendations. k. Warranty requirements. I. Compatibility of materials. m. Acceptability of substrates. n. Temporary facilities and controls. o. Space and access limitations. p. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1 . Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1 .6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1 . Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1 .7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. �`► 1 . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1 . Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1 . Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1 . Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1 .4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1 . Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1 . Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1 .5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1 . Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the seventh of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1 . Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect at first project meeting of the month. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1 . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 5. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Initial progress report. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1 . Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Contractor's name and address. d. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of low Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1 .4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1 . Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Provide subschedules showing values for each building. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 "1%1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1 . Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1 .5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 . 1 .6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1 . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1 . After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 OPW SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART ] - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1 .3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1 .4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1 . Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA 40ft" February 5, 2008 1 . Add the amount for all work related to unforeseen plaster replacement in excess of the defined scope of repairs in the Bid Documents: a. Unit of Measure: Square foot area. END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES & UNIT PRICES 012300 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 B. Notification of Alternates: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 1 . Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. C. Unit Prices: Fully document field conditions that will adjust the Contract Sum through Unit Prices. Notify Architect and Owner of conditions and quantities as they are discovered. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. General: The Bid Form will reflect the costs alternates separately for each house. The alternates shall be listed are as follows: B. Alternate No.1 : (Albright, Lamont and Park Annex) 1 . Add the amount for all work related to up-grading fire alarms and exit signage. C. Alternate No 2: (Albright, Lamont and Park Annex) 1 . Add the amount for network tie-in to energy management system. D. Alternate No. 3: (Albright and Park Annex) 1 . Add the amount for all work related to add new steam radiators on system auto-control. 3.2 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price 1 : (Albright, Lamont and Park Annex) ..,, ALTERNATES & UNIT PRICES 012300 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES & UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates and unit prices. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1 . The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Unit Price: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that will be the basis for changes in the Work for unforeseen conditions. 1 . The cost for each unit price is the cost per unit of measure that will be the basis for modifications to the Contract Sum. 1 .4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1 . Include as part of each alternate or unit price, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate or unit price. ALTERNATES & UNIT PRICES 012300 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 .10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1 . Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 01 : Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1 . Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable .. as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1 .8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. 1 . Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1 .9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 1 . Double Shifts and Weekend Hours: When necessary to meet project delivery schedule Contractor shall provide necessary work force at no additional expense to the Owner. 2. Early Morning Hours: Comply with local zoning ordinance and regulations of the City of Northampton for early hour restrictions in residential neighborhoods. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1 . Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission. _awok SUMMARY 011000 - 4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 ., 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner- furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner- furnished items at Project site. 8. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 9. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 10. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1 . Double-tray shower bases for Albright and second floor of Park Annex. 2. Shower doors in Albright and second floor of Park Annex. 3. Wall mounted student room light fixtures for Albright and Park Annex. 4. Ceiling mounted corridor lighting in Albright and Lamont. 5. Replacement smoke detectors as indicated. 1 .7 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1 . Limits: Confine constructions operations to designated areas at each site. a. Owner's representative will review and approve staging areas for each site with the Contractor's requirements. Restoration of paving, tree protection and preparation of lawn areas for seeding by the Owner will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving adjacent premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. SUMMARY 011000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 1 . Albright House: Room and corridor finishes, bathroom renovations and limited electrical upgrades. 2. Lamont House: Room and corridor finishes, first floor public space finishes, bathroom ventilation, limited electrical upgrades, flashing replacement to existing masonry walls above the dining room, areaway drainage repair and brick paver repair at dining hall entrance. 3. Park Annex: Room and corridor finishes, bathroom renovations, first floor accessibility improvements, new stair enclosure, limited electrical upgrades. 1 .4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract for each building. 1 .5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1 . Park Annex Roof Replacement: A separate contract will be awarded for the replacement of the roof at Park Annex. a. Coordination of roof penetrations for new work will be required. Flashing will be the responsibility of the Roofing Contractor. 1 .6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1 . Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. SUMMARY 011000 - 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 0 1 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work under other contracts. 4. Products ordered in advance. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Use of premises. 7. Owner's occupancy requirements. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1 .3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Refurbishment of Albright House, Lamont House and Park Annex. 1 . Project Location: Campus of Smith College, Northampton, MA 01060 B. Owner: Trustees of Smith College 1 . Owner's Representative: Charlie Conant C. Architect: Archimetrics Design Studio 1 . Project Architect: Peter Lapointe D. The Work consists of the following refurbishment of finishes, bathroom renovations, limited sprinkler modifications and limited electrical and fire alarm upgrades in association with the Work as follows: SUMMARY 011000 - 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Flooring Contractors Mercier Carpet W. Springfield, MA Landmark Flooring Con- cept Albany, NY M. Frank Higgins & Co. Newington, CT Ayotte & King Chicopee, MA Dion A& Son Flooring Hadley, MA END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 6 �'"* Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Sheet Metal Fabricators (cont) Misc. Metals Berkshire Air W. Springfield, MA Accufab Goshen, MA Custom Sheet Metal Haydenville, MA Arrow Welding Hatfield, MA Hurley and David Air Springfield, MA ARC Welding Hadley, MA Ralph's Welding Northampton, MA Automatic Temperature Control SWE Springfield, MA Yankee Technology Ludlow, MA Millwork Fire Protection Westek Westfield, MA. Allied Fire Protection Springfield, MA Amherst Woodworking Northampton, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA John Carlo Woodworking Westfield, MA H.F.P. Westfield Wright Architectural Northampton, MA Warehouse Mechanical S. Hadley, MA Haydenville Woodwork- ing Amherst, MA Laurel Hill (Peter Dellert) Holyoke, MA Electrical Contractors Bradford Woodworking Florence, MA Collins Electric Chicopee, MA P.A.W. Inc. Ludlow, MA David R. Northup Electric Agawam, MA Haas Electric South Hadley, MA "* Roofing Contractors M.L. Schmitt, Inc. Springfield, MA Morris Springfield, MA Orchard Electric Northampton, MA Titan Chicopee, MA Coughlin Electrical, Inc. Westborough, MA Granby, MA-467- Maheu, Joe - Sm. proj. 9581 Easthampton Electric Easthampton, MA Westfield, MA-532- Pelletier, Al - Sm. Proj. 6346 Universal Electric Springfield, MA Ernest Peterson Inc. Hartford, CT Allied Restoration-carlise flats East Hartford, CT Communication Contractors Haas Elec. South Hadley, MA Painting Contractors Hogan Communications Holyoke, MA Lococo, Owen Northampton, MA Coughlin Electrical, Inc. Springfield, MA Angelica Communica- Northeast Northampton, MA tions Holyoke, MA Coffey & Heady Northampton, MA Environmental Contrac- Callahan, Joe Pelham, MA tors Novotny Northampton, MA Abide East Longmeadow ATC Associates West Springfield GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 5 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 insurance shall not terminate without at least twenty- (20) day's prior written notice to the col- lege. Please add the college to all applicable policies as additional insured and instruct your insurance agent(s) to forward original insurance certificates directly to: Smith College And a Copy To: Charlie Conant Purchasing Department Smith College 126 West Street 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01063 Northampton, MA 01063 (or fax to 413-585-2398) You will be required to maintain adequate insurance coverage throughout the entire period of your contract or supplier relationship with the college. The insurance agent must provide new original certificates directly to the college whenever new policies are issued or policies are changed or updated. Failure to have or maintain coverage or to provide original certificates may be cause for cancellation or non-renewal or your con- tract. 1 .10 PREFERRED SUB-CONTRACTORS �►,�.A��Irovecl Subco ��l����� �� �s� � $, 4` ` '�ry � � �k � � �� ��,.�a,.: Site Elevator Contractors Warner Bros. Sunderland, MA Schindler Hartford, CT T&M Equipment Corp. Springfield, MA Bay State Chicopee, MA Palmer Paving Palmer, MA Otis W. Springfield, MA Marion Excavating S. Hadley, MA Associated Elevator S. Yarmouth, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Dietz Const. Corporation Easthampton, MA Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Mechanical Contractors Karl's Excavating, Inc. Hadley, MA Harry Grodsky Co. Springfield, MA JC & Company Northampton, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA T.J. Conway Springfield, MA Landscape B-G Mechanical Chicopee, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Adams Plumbing & Heating Pittsfield, MA K.R. Longtin Northampton, MA Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Sheet Metal Fabricators Mt. View Landscapes & Chicopee, MA Kleeberg Sheet Metal Ludlow, MA Amherst Landscaping Amherst, MA Fisher Sheet Metal Springfield, MA GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 4 ^* Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 Coverage is to include Broad Form Property Damage, XCU hazard (if appropriate), Con- tractual Liability and be Occurrence Form unless otherwise agreed. Auto Liability 1 ,000,000 Combined Single Limit Coverage is to include All Owned Autos or Scheduled Autos and Hired Autos and Non- Owned Autos. Worker's Compensation Statutory Worker's Compensation Worker's Liability 1 ,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit 500,000 Disease - Each Employee 500,000 Each Accident (Not required of proprietorships and partnerships, which have no employees, if any employees are subcontracted, coverage will be required, even if the employees are considered "independent contractors". A statement via letter must be provided with the certificates or policy copies stating that the firm has no employees other than the Ate+ proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of Health Insurance is required of all-sole proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of health insurance is required of all-sole proprietors and partners.) Excess Liability 1 ,000,000 Each Occurrence 1 ,000,000 Aggregate Umbrella Form required unless otherwise agreed. You may substitute a higher amount of general liability coverage in lieu of a follow form umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of general liability coverage as requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of insur- ance carried, even if it is less than the amount requested. PLEASE NOTE: The following wording must appear on every insurance certificate submitted: The Trustees of Smith College and any present or former trustee, director, officer, administer, employee, student, volunteer worker or Agent, is added as an additional insured to the General Liability, Auto, Employers, Liability and Excess Policies, as their interests may appear. This AOKI GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MIA February 5, 2008 1 .5 ADMINISTRATION A. Each building will require separate permits, schedules, meetings, submittals and payment procedures. 1 .6 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparing and obtaining all necessary permits. 1 . Demolition Permit: Contractor shall prepare and file BWF AQ06 permit with DEQE prior to any demolition activities. 1 .7 PROJECT SCHEDULE A. Start Date: May 20, 2008 1 . Reunion weekend May 22-25: Construction activity subject to acceptance by the Owner. 2. Substantial Completion: August 15, 2008 3. Final Occupancy: August 22, 2008 1 .8 PREFERRED SUB-CONTRACTORS A. Included at the end of this document is the Owner's preferred sub-contractor list. Use of tradespersons for disciplines not listed is at the discretion of the Contractor. Use of sub-contractors for listed trades not on the preferred list is subject to acceptance by the Owner's. 1 .9 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS SMITH COLLEGE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS All contractors who routinely transact business on the Smith College Campus must meet the following insurance requirements: General Liability: 2,000,000 General Aggregate 1 ,000,000 Product/Completed Operations 1 ,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury 50,000 Fire Damage Legal Liability 5,000 Medical Expense GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 2 llftl Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 BID REQUIREMENTS A. Time and place of Bid: Proposals for the Work shall be received not later than 2:00 pm EST on Thursday, February 28, 2008 at the Smith College Physical Plant, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA. 1 .2 BID PROCEDURES A. Proposals may be submitted for any or all of the three buildings. Indicate the proposed value of the work in the appropriate space on the bid form. B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any and all proposals, waive any irregularities or take any actions that are in the interest of the College. C. Approved Sub-Contractor List: Contractors may not use sub-contractors other than those on the approved sub-contractor list included at the end of this section without prior approval by the Owner. D. The Owner will award the work separately for each building project. 1 .3 WORK SUMMARY A. The proposed projects include refurbishment of three dormitories on Campus: 1 . Albright House 2. Lamont House 3. Park Annex B. Separate Projects: Each building shall be considered a separate project for administrative and payment procedures. 1 .4 CONTRACT AWARD A. The Owner may award each project individually or multiple projects to a single Contractor. Should multiple projects be awarded to a single contractor then one contract will be executed for the scope of the Work. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 1 §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE " §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. §13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.6 INTEREST §13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. §13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD §13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. $7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes; (3008760867) Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK §12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 GOVERNING LAW §13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. §13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE §13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. §13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES §13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. §13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS §13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. §13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,®925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be $s / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12120/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. §12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK §12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such Awk. insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. §11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. §11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. §11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. §11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. §11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. §11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. Init. AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,®925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. $4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1. §11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE §11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. §11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. §11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. §11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. §11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. §11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. IJ AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.6 EMERGENCIES §10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. §11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. §11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. §11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law: This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12120/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, , ""' reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. §10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS §10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. §10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. §10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS §10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. §10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. Init. AIA Document A201 TM— Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION eA�'* §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT §9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. .28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02107/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2006 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) ARTICLE 8 TIME ,.R,,, §8.1 DEFINITIONS §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. §8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 CONTRACT SUM §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES §9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. §9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,®925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A10 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_I which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. §7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers' compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties'agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. §7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. §7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. Init. AIA Document A201Tm—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by ^" the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. §6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP §6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 GENERAL §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may,by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. Init. AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 24 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3. §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including,without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except " by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect,Owner,Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 DEFINITIONS §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. §5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. Init. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 22 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. §4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. §4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. §4.5 MEDIATION §4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. §4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree :! otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. §4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §4.6 ARBITRATION §4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5. §4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. §4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_I which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time §4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. §4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. §4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. §4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision.An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. §4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision.The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. Init. AIA Document A201 T°—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 20 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. §4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. §4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.If the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4.4. §4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6. §4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5) termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. Init. AIA Document A201*M—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This his AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will ""I* not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of,nor be responsible for,the construction means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Section 3.3.1. §4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed.However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. Aaft §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 8 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §3.16 ACCESS TO WORK * §3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS §3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 INDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.1 ARCHITECT §4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. §4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4,2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. §4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Cqntractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. §3.13 USE OF SITE §3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 CLEANING UP §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 16 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written , ► request in each case. §3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. §3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. §3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE §3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications, Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. §3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 15 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §3.5 WARRANTY §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the AM* Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized,may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.6 TAXES §3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §3.7 PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. §3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and AM** rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. §3.8 ALLOWANCES §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. §3.9 SUPERINTENDENT §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.Important Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be (4 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of ,tt any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. §3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. §3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. §3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Init. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_I which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. •* , §2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. §2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. §2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. §2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK §2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. §2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK §2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period.If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 GENERAL §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. §3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR §3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the AOWN Init. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This A10 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 12 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.10003354171 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) §1.3 CAPITALIZATION §1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 INTERPRETATION §1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any" and articles such as"the" and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. §1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.6.1 The Drawings,Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work.The Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 GENERAL §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or Init. AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 11 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS §1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS , §1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). §1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Contractor,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and Architect or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 THE WORK The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. §1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. §1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams. §1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. §1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,®925, 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 0 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) 5 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Subcontractors,Work by CONTRACT A 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 14 9.6.7 Tests and Inspections Subcontractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 14.2.1,14.3.2 TIME Submittals 8 1.6,3.10, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, Time,Delays and Extensions of 9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Subrogation,Waivers of 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7 Time Limits Substantial Completion 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 9.8.1 13.7, 14 Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims 5.2.3,5.2.4 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 Substitution of Architect Title to Work 4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3 Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF 3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 WORK Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12 5.1.2 Uncovering of Work Subsurface Conditions 12.1 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 3.9,10.2.6 Use of Documents Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Use of Site 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety Values,Schedule of 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,9.3.1 Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect 9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 2.2.3 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner 14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3.10,14.2.4 4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens Taxes 9.10.2,9.10.4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7 4.3.10,14.1 Warranty Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.53,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2, 4.3.10,5.4.1.1,14.2 13.7.13 Termination of the Architect Weather Delays 4.1.3 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of 14.2.2 1.1.3 Written Consent Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIO Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 8 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5 Architect Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor OF 3.12 10 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14 Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.12.2 3.17 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.6.2 Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and Property 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1,14.1.4 10.2,10.6 Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Programs 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1,10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of 1.1.4 3.12.3 Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 11.3 Samples at the Site,Documents and Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11 1.1.7 Schedule of Values Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.5 Schedules, Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Constructionl2.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 4.2.10 6.1.3 Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contractors 10.2.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Testing 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Representatives Specifications,Definition of the 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6 13.2.1 Specifications,The Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 4.4,4.5,4.6 Statute of Limitations Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work 10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.1.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, AMW 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1, 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4 Procedures of Construction Owner's Financial Capability 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Mechanic's Lien Owner's Liability Insurance 4.4.8 11.2 Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 13 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, Award Separate Contracts 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.1 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work 6.2 2.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2 12.2.1, 13.7.13 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5 Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.2.5 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14 3.17 Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Applications for 13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, Notice to Proceed 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 8,2,2 Payment,Certificates for Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 2.2.2,3.7, 3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of 1.5.2,3.2, 3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Occupancy Payment,Final 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8,11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Orders,Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.1.1,2.3, 3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 OWNER Payments,Progress 2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2.1 9 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8, 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB Owner's Authority 10.3.1 AIA Document A201 TO—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 6 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective 3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, Liability 8.2,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.3 Extensions of Time Insurance,Property 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5,11.4 9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials Failure of Payment 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS Faulty Work 11 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlement with 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest 11.4 13.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation 1 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 Governing Law Interpretations,Written 13.1 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Hazardous Materials 4.6.4 10.2.4,10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6 1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 5.2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 4.3.8,10.2,10.6 Liens Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1,13.5 4.6.4 Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of 1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4, 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 11.4.2 4.2,7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9, 11.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3 11.4.3 Material Suppliers Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 11.2 Materials,Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. (3008760867) User Notes: 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2.5,3.14 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractors 11.1 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.4, 12.2.4 and Owner's Forces Damage to the Work 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3,14.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Damages for Delay 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.1.2 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3 Contractor's Representations Day,Definition of 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, 9.7 Rejection and Correction of Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2, 4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition of 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1 9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions Contractor's Superintendent 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9.1,9.8.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time Procedures 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination and Correlation 3.11 1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5 1.6,2.2.5, 3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3 1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies 12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5,10.6, 14.1.1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2, 10.3, Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materials and Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,61.1,6.2.3, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work Cutting and Patching AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 1654:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12120/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4, /III. Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4,11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7,2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 10.3.3 5.4,14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance 4.6.5 4.3.3 Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9,14 4.3.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3,11.4.6, 11.5.1 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,The Cleaning Up 1.1,1.2 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 13.7 Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2, 11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1,8.2, 3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1 9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 9 Contractor,Definition of Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees AOW AIA Document A201 Tr"—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 3 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by ALA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. (3008760867) User Notes: INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 ,f (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 1.6 Access to Work Architect's Decisions 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5, Accident Prevention 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 4.2.3, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Acts and Omissions Architect's Inspections 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Instructions Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Interpretations Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Project Representative Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.10 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 13.4.2, 13.5 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 3.8 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 11.4.1.1 13.5 Applications for Payment Asbestos 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Attorneys'Fees Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Separate Contracts Arbitration 6.1.1,6.1.2 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 11.4.10 Portions of the Work Architect 5.2 4.1 Basic Definitions Architect,Definition of 1.1 4.1.1 Bidding Requirements Architect,Extent of Authority 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance 9.2,9.3.1, 9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.4.2 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Bonds,Lien Architect,Limitations of Authority and 9.10.2 Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Payment 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.4, Building Permit 5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 1.3 Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion Init. AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915'1918'1925'1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in seven;civil and criminal penalties,and will be 2 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Openalties,No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12120/2008,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3008760867) ow = Document A201 - 1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: IAlbright,Lamont and Park Annex The author of this document has Smith College added information needed for its completion.The author may also THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original (Name and address): AIA standard form.An Additions and Trustees of Smith College Deletions Report that notes added 126 West Street information as well as revisions to Northampton,MA 01060 the standard form text is available from the author and should be THE ARCHITECT: reviewed.A vertical line in the left (Name and address): margin of this document indicates Archimetrics Design Studio where the author has added 28 North Maple Street necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted Unit B Florence,MA 01062 from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an TABLE OF ARTICLES attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated 2 OWNER General Contractors of America 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A201 TO—1 7.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be i prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:54:09 on 02/07/2008 under Order No.1000335417_1 which expires on 12/20/2008,and is not for resale. (3008760867) User Notes: Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont amd Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 LAMONT HOUSE Base Bid:----------------------------------------------------------------dollars. $------------------------------------00 For Alternate 1 : Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 2: Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 3: Not Applicable For Unit Price 1 : Add:-------------------dollars per square foot. $-------------00 PARK ANN EX BaseBid:----------------------------------------------------------------dollars. $------------------------------------00 For Alternate 1 : Add-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 2: Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 3: Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Unit Price 1 : Add:-------------------dollars per square foot. $-------------00 Signed--------------------------------------------Title------------------- Date:---------------- Company------------------------------------------- FORM OF GENERAL BID 2 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont amd Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 BID FORM I, -------------------------------, propose to provide all materials and labor necessary for completing the work as defined in the Construction Documents dated February 5, 2008 for Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex including Addenda (if any) as follows: I acknowledge receipt of Addenda Numbers: 1 2 3 none (circle one) ALBRIGHT HOUSE Base Bid:------------------------------------------------------------dollars. $-----------------------------------.00 For Alternate 1 : Add:----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 2: Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Alternate 3: Add:-----------------------------------dollars. $-------------00 For Unit Price 1 : Add:-------------------dollars per square foot. $-------------00 FORM OF GENERAL BID 1 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ........ ................................... 3 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 215300 FIRE PROTECTION ....................................... ...................................22 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 225400 PLUMBING................................................... ...................................39 ' DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 235500 HVAC.......................................................... ...................................40 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 266100 ELECTRICAL................................................ ...................................25 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT APPLICABLE TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex ,. Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY........................................... ................................... 1 1 DIVISION 05 - METALS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS............................. ................................... 6 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY.................................... ................................... 9 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK..... ................................... 9 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION................................. ................................... 6 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING ............... 5 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS.................................. ................................... 5 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS.................... ................................... 5 085200 WOOD WINDOWS ........................................ ................................... 9 087100 DOOR HARDWARE....................................... ................................... 14 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING........... ................................... 5 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING..................... ................................... 7 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .................... ................................... 7 096400 WOOD FLOORING....................................... ................................... 5 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING ....................... ................................... 5 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING................................. ................................... 6 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .......................... ................................... 5 096813 TILE CARPETING......................................... ................................... 5 096816 SHEET CARPETING...................................... ................................... 6 097200 WALL COVERINGS ...................................... ................................... 5 097500 WALL COVERINGS ...................................... ................................... 3 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING ................................... ................................... 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS............................. ................................... 4 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ................................... 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 0*4 Refurbishment of Albright, Lamont and Park Annex Smith College, Northampton, MA February 5, 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division Section Title................................................. ...................................Pages] BIDFORM .................................................................... ................................... 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS - AIA A201-1997...................... ................................... 4 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................ ................................... 6 011000 SUMMARY................................................... ................................... 5 012300 ALTERNATES............................................... ................................... 3 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES.... ................. 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES............................... ................................... 4 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION................................. 8 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ................................ 6 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES............................ ................................... 8 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS..... ................................... 8 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS........................... ................................... 7 017300 EXECUTION................................................. ................................... 6 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING............................ ................................... 4 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES............................. ................................... 5 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ....... ................................... 8 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS................... ................................... 4 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Project No. 5-110 �-' March 14, 2007 PROJECT MANUAL REFURBISHMENT Of ALBRIGHT, LAMONT and PARK ANNEX SMITH COLLEGE NORTHAMPTON, MA - -- coz y 8002 0 € Ndd ''fie► � _ ____ O O �rLD ARAN LApo l February 5, 2007 0 Na. 52 Architect F ARCHIMETRICS DESIGN STUDIO 28 NORTH MAPLE STREET, FLORENCE, MA 01062 PH 413-582-9100 FAX 413-582.9101 Consulting Engineers Interior Design LINDGREN &SHARPLES LUKAS DESIGN 435 COTTAGE STREET 140 HARKNESS ROAD SPRINGFIELD, MAO 1 104-4005 PELHAM, MA 0 1002 413-253-9949 PH 413-732-4336 FAx 413-731-0786 FAX 413-253-7949 0 OF �� rF`MAS s CHARLES p G 4 yG 0. LINDGREN, P. N, 1R., P.E. SHARPLES y ,p No. 22425 O 26940 GJ TE T E� k� S